JP7056001B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. A gaming machine to be executed is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state includes a plurality of game states having different probabilities of winning the big hit lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game states.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, there is still room for improvement in the transition of the gaming state.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is capable of entering a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on the front surface of the gaming board and a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and is based on this entry. A gaming machine including a starting ball entry means capable of executing a predetermined lottery and a gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. The normal control state keeps staying at a predetermined continuation rate based on the first gaming state and the result of the predetermined lottery, and makes it easier to win the predetermined lottery than the first gaming state. A second gaming state and a third gaming state in which the player continues to stay at a continuation rate higher than the predetermined continuation rate based on the result of the predetermined lottery and is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state . The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means, and the gaming state transition means includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state. A gaming state switching means for switching the state is provided, and the gaming state is the first when the result of a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means is won. Only when the combination of the starting ball entering means and the second starting ball entering means and the first gaming state and the second gaming state becomes a predetermined combination, the game machine is shifted to the third gaming state, and the gaming machine is changed to the third gaming state. , It is characterized in that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the second game state is notified.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for an internal lottery A diagram showing an electric role winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the electric accessory opening lottery. A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a jackpot type. The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flow chart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the process for electric service support The figure which shows the flowchart of the electric service data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the electric service fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. The figure which shows the flowchart of the 1st support mode setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd support mode setting process The figure which shows the value of the game count counter set in the 1st support mode setting process or the 2nd support mode setting process. The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation end processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the electric service fluctuation end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision process The figure which shows the flowchart of the decision process of an effect pattern. A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the flowchart at the time of transition of a winning / fail lottery mode and a support mode. The figure which shows the display screen, the 1st hold lamp part, and the 2nd hold lamp part of the symbol display device at the time of transition of a winning / fail lottery mode and a support mode. Shows the display screen, the first hold lamp section, and the second hold lamp section of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the "most advantageous result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high frequency support mode. figure The display screen, the first hold lamp section, and the second hold lamp section of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high frequency support mode. Figure shown The figure which shows the flowchart at the time of transition of the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the 1st hold lamp part is not turned on. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the 1st hold lamp part, and the 2nd hold lamp part at the time of transition of the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the 1st hold lamp part is not turned on. Shows the display screen, the first hold lamp section, and the second hold lamp section of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the "most advantageous result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high frequency support mode. figure The display screen, the first hold lamp section, and the second hold lamp section of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high frequency support mode. Figure shown Front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for an internal lottery The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process Front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the 1st support mode setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the electric service fluctuation end processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision process Shows the display screen, the first hold lamp unit, and the second hold lamp unit of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the short-term high-frequency support mode and the “most advantageous result”. figure The display screen of the symbol display device, the first hold lamp section, and the second hold lamp at the time of the transition to the short-term high-frequency support mode and the winning / fail lottery mode and the transition to the support mode when the "explicit low-round high-accuracy result" is obtained. Diagram showing the part

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It is equipped with twelve.

The gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and the game machine main body 12 is arranged in front of the inner frame and on both the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the upper and lower portions, and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the rotation operation amount thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 has an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out opening 39 provided in each opening. Have. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game ball in the game area.

Each of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40b to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and these detection sensors 40b to 40d is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the upper operating port 36 includes a detection sensor 40b, the lower operating port 37 has a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detection sensor 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b to 40d. The detection sensors 40b to 40d may be any kind as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out openings 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flowing. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a entry in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. Each of the operating ports 36 and 37 opens upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged above and the lower operating port 37 is arranged below. It is installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower actuating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper ends of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operating port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win a prize in the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state, and can win a prize in the lower operating port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state. can.

In addition, the electric accessory 37a is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) instead of the closed state and the open state described above. The operating port 37 may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 37 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by setting the electric accessory 37a but by the displacement of the lower operating port 37. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 37 may be configured. 37 does not have to be provided with the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening 38a that opens to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and a variable winning opening 38b that drives the opening / closing door 38b. It is provided with a drive unit 38c.
The player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 has a transparent portion 381a formed transparently (or translucently) so that the variable winning device 38 can be visually recognized from the front side, and an opaque portion formed around the transparent portion 381a and formed opaquely. It is provided with a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21.

The large winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around one side on the lower side as a central axis. The opening / closing door 38b rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 so as to open the opening of the large winning opening 38a and rotate toward the inside of the game board 31. By being buried in the game board 31, it has a closed state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is closed.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is called one round game.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a display unit 46 for accessories, and has a plurality of segment display units (not shown) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display unit, and the like. It is configured by arranging the display device of.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 has a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is provided with a second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as a starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower actuating port 37 is in an open state in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display unit, a dot display unit, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display unit and the organic display unit are organic. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as an EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The design display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a second holding lamp portion 49b. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the area on the right side of the holding lamp portion 49b.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas, and the left symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times are from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol column, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, the symbol of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control for causing the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power supply that executes launch control for causing the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. It is equipped with a launch control device 80, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace upon opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace upon opening. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a hit / miss table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service hit / miss table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 has a main display, an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40b to 40f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls lent to the player at the time of a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 has a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. The power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are met.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate the reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 as the electric service holding information at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41 (FIG. 4) is stored.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The holding area Ra for the first result display unit provided as the storage means for the first ball entry unit includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the upper operating port 36 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four prizes for the game balls to the upper operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second ball entry section storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four prizes for the game balls to the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the reserved number stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE has the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first result display unit holding area Ra has a plurality of internal lottery information associated with the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. It functions as a storage means for the first ball entry section for storing (holding information).
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has a plurality of internal lottery information (holding) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It functions as a storage means for the second ball entry section for storing information).

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Further, the electric service holding area 64c includes an electric service execution area (not shown) like the holding ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. May be.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 65535 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 65535, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. To.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the thing opening lottery).

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an electric service winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers won in the electric accessory opening lottery are stored.
Among the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the electric accessory opening lottery is, as shown in FIG. It is stored in 63c (see FIG. 4) as an electric service winning / failing table (electrical service winning / failing information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning the game ball to the lower operating port 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

Specifically, the electric service winning / failing table includes the electric service winning / failing table (low-frequency electric service winning / failing information group) for the low-frequency support mode shown in FIG. 6 (a) and the high-frequency support shown in FIG. 6 (b). It is equipped with an electric service winning / failing table for modes (high-frequency electric service winning / failing information group).
The MPU 62 executes the electric bonus opening lottery by comparing these electric utility winning / failing tables with the values of the electric bonus opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c.

These electric service winning / failing tables have a plurality of electric accessory opening lottery results (electric service winning / failing results) of "electric service opening winning" and "electric service opening loss result".
Specifically, in a gaming state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode is referred to at the time of the electric character opening lottery, as shown in FIG. 6A, the “electric service opening winning” is obtained. The value of the random number is one. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode is referred to at the time of the electric function opening lottery, the probability of becoming the "electric service opening winning" is 1/65536.
On the other hand, in a gaming state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode is referred to in the electric accessory opening lottery, as shown in FIG. 6B, the electric service opening winning is achieved. The value of the random number is 65535. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the electric service winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode is referred to in the electric service opening lottery, the probability of becoming the “electric service opening winning” is 65535/65536. Here, the value of the random number that is stored in the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode is the "electrical service opening winning" stored in the electric service winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode. It is included in the value of the random number.

In addition, the value and number of random numbers stored in each electric service winning / failing table are arbitrary, and if the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of being "electrical service open winning" than the low-frequency support mode. good. In addition, the value of the random number that is stored in the electric service winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode is the "electrical service opening winning" stored in the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode. It does not have to include the value of the random number, and may include a part of the value of the random number that becomes the “winning of the electric service open” stored in the electric service winning / failing table for the low frequency support mode.

In the high frequency support mode, compared to the low frequency support mode, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also long. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one opening state is shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the object display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning a prize in the lower operating port 37 than in the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lower actuating port 37 includes a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode functions as an inaccessible state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and the high-frequency support mode allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball. Functions as possible.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively higher than that of the low-frequency support mode, and the low-frequency support mode and In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery may be the same. For example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reservation times is shortened. It may be configured to do so. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 59, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59, similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (win / fail lottery) for generating a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is set in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (pass / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 7 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information) shown in FIG. 7 (b). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / miss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win / fail tables have the results (win / fail results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit win", "special miss result", and "normal miss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating a big hit, the probability of becoming a “big hit winning” is 1/30.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 20. Is. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating a big hit, the probability of becoming a “big hit winning” is 1/3. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the high probability mode. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the high probability mode (second gaming state) executes an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode (first gaming state).

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, other than the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these deviation results are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 8, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is distributed in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 36. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 8A, the first distribution table includes "unspecified small round high probability result (low probability result corresponding to small round)" and "explicit small round high probability result (high corresponding to small round)". Multiple distribution results of "probability result)" and "most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result", and "10 to 19" is assigned. "Clear small round high accuracy result" is assigned, and "20-29" is assigned to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 37. It is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 8B, the second distribution table uses only the distribution result of the "most advantageous result" as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the second distribution table, "0 to 29" among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2 are distributed to the "most advantageous result".

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63d (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63.

Here, in the case of "big hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery and being distributed to the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 sets the combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. Stop display on the valid line L. In addition, when it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery and is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery. If the result is a "special deviation result", the symbol display device 47 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal deviation result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

In the reach display, when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery and is distributed to the "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery), the reach display is performed. It occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“Big hit win” in the winning / failing lottery, and “Unspecified small round high probability result” or “Explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into "probability result" or in the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the distribution lottery has been distributed to the "most advantageous result".

The mode of reach display is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol strings are stopped and displayed, and then the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it is a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it is a "special loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

The mode of the notice display is a part of the symbol rows (for example, for example) in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. A predetermined character in a situation where a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variablely displayed or a reach display is generated after the symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and may be displayed by changing the background, or may change the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40b to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to execute the payout of the prize ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 41 is four, and the third hold lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the number of hold lamps.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the upper operating port 36. Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not the above is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp portion 49a or the second holding lamp portion 49b is the holding number. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Executes the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of executions of the process in step S305, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower actuating port 37. In this electric function support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.
The electric service support process in step S306 will be described in detail later.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. This power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S308, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has been reached in step S309, that is, the current normal processing is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes the next step S301 again to perform the next time. Normal processing starts.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Waits for elapse.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erasing switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method for confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 sends an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and the timer interrupt in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game times control process>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game rotation control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display in step S502, that is, the game round is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. If it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Executes the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra2. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Is shown to start (first variation display).

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that shifts the hold information for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Is shown to start (second variation display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that shifts the hold information for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is displayed from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. When it is read out and it is determined in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this hit / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. But the same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a “big hit winning”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the process after step S706 is executed, and if it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the process. , The processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processing after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined by the MPU 62 to be "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the MPU 62 sets the unspecified small round high accuracy result flag and sets the "explicit small round high accuracy result". If it is specified that it is "the most advantageous result", the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process (processing after step S712) when the winning / failing result is determined not to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", the process after step S713 is executed, and when it is determined in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is to execute the processing after step S715.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and determines the information. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special off flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the off-result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is the "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S704 is the "normal deviation result", the reach generation lottery is performed. If it is won, it is determined that reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of pending items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 36 increases. The display duration when digesting the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by reference to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by reference to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set to the opposite relationship to the above-mentioned relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the hit / fail result and the distribution result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variable command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 in step S301 of the normal process to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. Further, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

Further, the variable command includes information related to the winning / failing lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) and information related to the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode). Further, the variable display command is a variable display information for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. (1st variable display or 2nd variable display) is included.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special missed result", and "normal missed result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "unspecified small round high probability result", the "explicit small round high probability result", and the "most advantageous result" as the information related to the distribution result.
In the following description, the result of success or failure and the result of distribution are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start processing.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game rounds in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display (variable end execution process). The fluctuation end processing will be described in detail later.

Here, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game field or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a fraudulent act similar to the case where the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done.
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol row to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit or the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. ..
Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the upper action port Priority is given to the hold information stored in the second result display hold area Rb regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the first result display hold area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to 36. It is set for digestion of game times. In other words, the MPU 62 stores the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of hold information stored in the second result display section hold area Rb in the first result display section hold area Ra. It gives priority to the result of the internal lottery associated with.

<Processing for electric service support>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric service support process.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S809 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the accessory display unit 46 is in the variable display, that is, whether or not the electric service game is in progress.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the accessory display unit 46 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the accessory display unit 46 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S806.

First, in step S801, a process (process after step S802) when it is determined that the accessory display unit 46 is not in the variable display will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the electric service support process without executing the process after step S803. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the electric service game times regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 determines in step S803 whether or not the electric service hold quantity RcN is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number of reserved electric service RcN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the electric service support process without executing the process after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number of electric service hold numbers RcN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 transmits the electric service hold information stored in the electric service hold area 64c in step S804. Executes the electric role data setting process for setting for the digestion of the role game times. After that, in step S805, the MPU 62 causes the accessory display unit 46 to start the variation display, executes the electricity combination variation start process for digesting the electric role game times, and ends the electric role support process.
Hereinafter, the electric service data setting process in step S804 and the electric service fluctuation start process in step S805 will be described in detail.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric service data setting process.
In the electric service data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S904 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the electric service holding number RcN in the electric service holding area 64c.
In step S902, the MPU 62 moves the electric service holding information stored in the storage area of the electric service holding area 64c to the electric service execution area.
In step S903, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the electric service hold information stored in the storage area of the electric service hold area 64c. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the electric service hold information stored in each storage area of the electric service hold area 64c to the electric service execution area side.

In step S904, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the electric service hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and performs the electric service data setting process. To finish. This shift command is a voice indicating that the shift of the electric service hold information is executed for the electric service hold information stored in the storage area of the electric service hold area 64c based on the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41. It contains information for making the light emission control device 90 recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the third holding lamp unit 49c as the number of electric service holdings of the game balls winning in each through gate 41 decreases.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of electric service fluctuation start processing.
In the electric service fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode by determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. This high frequency support flag will be described in detail later.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when it is determined that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 whether the electric service is correct or not for the low-frequency support mode. When the table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the electric service hit / fail table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 and it is determined in step S1001 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is determined in step S1003. The electric service winning / failing table (see FIG. 6B) is read from the electric service winning / failing table storage area 63c of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S1002 or step S1003, the MPU 62 executes the electric service success / failure determination process in step S1004. In this electric service winning / failing determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 with the electric service winning / failing table read in step S1002 or step S1003. , The result of the electric accessory opening lottery (the result of the electric accessory winning / failing) is determined. As described above, the result of winning or failing the electric service is either "winning of the electric service opening" or "result of losing the opening of the electric service", and even if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is the high frequency support mode. But the same is true.

In step S1005, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric service winning / failing result determined in step S1004 is "electrical service opening winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the electric service winning / failing result is "electric service opening winning", the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the electric service opening winning in step S1006. In the stop result setting process for winning the electric service opening, the MPU 62 stores the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the accessory display unit 46 in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 46 by referring to the stop result table for the electric combination opening winning, which is stored in advance in the ROM 63.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of winning or failing the electric service is not the "winning of the electric service opening" (when it is determined in the case of determining that the result is the "result of the electric service opening off"), in step S1007, Executes the stop result setting process for the result of the release of the electric service. In the stop result setting process for the electric service release result, the MPU 62 stores the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the accessory display unit 46 in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 46 by referring to the stop result table for the electric combination release result stored in advance in the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1007, the MPU 62 executes the setting process of the electric service display duration (electric service display continuation period) in step S1008.
In the electric service display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 determines the electric service display duration by referring to the electric service display duration table for the high frequency support mode stored in the ROM 63. , The determined electric service display duration is set in the electric service display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the ROM 63 for the low frequency support mode. By referring to the combination display duration table, the electric combination display duration is determined, and the determined electric combination display duration is set in the electric combination display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Here, the electric service display duration table for the high frequency support mode is set to shorten the electric service display duration as compared with the electric service display duration table for the low frequency support mode. In other words, the electric service display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
In addition, the electric service display duration determined by referring to the electric service display duration table for the high frequency support mode is determined by referring to the electric service display duration table for the low frequency support mode. It is different from the role display duration.
It should be noted that the electric service display duration may be configured so as not to change depending on the support mode. Further, the electric service display duration table for the high frequency support mode and the electric service display duration table for the low frequency support mode may be the same.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a command for changing the electric service. This command for changing the electric service includes information related to the electric service display duration. The MPU 62 transmits the electric function fluctuation command set in step S1009 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the electric service fluctuation command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S1010, the MPU 62 causes the accessory display unit 46 to start variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric service fluctuation start process.

Returning to the description of the electric service support process, the process after step S806 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the accessory display unit 46 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the accessory display unit 46 is in the variable display, the processing after step S806. To execute.

In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric service display duration set in step S1008 of the electric service fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the electric service display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of the electric service display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric service display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the electric service variation display process in step S807. In this electric service variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the accessory display unit 46 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric service support process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric service display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the electric service fluctuation end process in step S808. In this electric service variation end process, the MPU 62 has information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of step S1006 or step S1007 of the electric service variation start process executed when the accessory display unit 46 starts the variation display (accessory). Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 46) is specified. Then, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the accessory display unit 46 which is being variablely displayed at the end of the electric service game round (the display control of the accessory display unit 46 is performed. Electric service fluctuation end execution processing). The process of ending the change in electric service will be described in detail later.

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets the electric service fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the electric service fluctuation end command set in step S809 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric service support process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the production of the electric service game times based on the electric service fluctuation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the electric service game times without requiring the reception of the electric service fluctuation end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1114 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1111.

First, in step S1101, a process (processes after step S1102) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variation display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 is completed, whether or not the result of the result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode in step S1103. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64 and then executes the processes of step S1104 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the hit / fail result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "normal off result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1105. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S1106. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1107. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the round counter RC in step S1108. Set to "4". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a of the total number of predetermined times is executed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of round games is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. Further, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S1105, step S1107, and step S1108, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time (waiting period) for opening to the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1109. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different depending on the type of the game result, such as a large difference between the case where the game result is the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be different.

In step S1110, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1110 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S1111) will be described.
In step S1111, the MPU 62 executes a large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1224 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1206.

First, in step S1201, a process (processing after step S1202) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the large winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T of the timer counter T is determined in step S1203. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1204.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1204 will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", in step S1302, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and the step is taken. In S1303, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the hit / fail result is not a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1304, and in step S1305, the distribution result. Is a small round high accuracy result (“unspecified small round high accuracy result” or “explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1306. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1303 or step S1306, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1307. In this open execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1302 or step S1304 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1303 or step S1306 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be won in the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore the upper limit of eight game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to have about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S1205 will be described with reference to FIG. 20.
The MPU 62 sets the opening command in step S1205 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1204. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1205 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1201, a process (processing after step S1206) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the large winning opening 38a is open will be described.
In step S1206, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1303 or step S1306 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1218.

First, in step S1206, processing when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (processing after step S1207) will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that no winning has occurred in the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1207 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1208.

In step S1209, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1210. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets the closure command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1211 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1212, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1223, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the result of success or failure is not a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1213.
In step S1213, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1214, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1215. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1215 is an open standby until the open / close door 38b is set to the open state, then the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again, and then the open / close door 38b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S1216.
In step S1216, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different depending on the type of the game result, such as a large difference between the case where the game result is the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than the above. It may be configured to be different.

In step S1217, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1217 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1206, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1218) will be described.
In step S1218, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1210 described above.
In step S1219, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1211 described above.

In step S1220, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1221.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1223.

First, in step S1220, a process (processes after step S1221) when the MPU 62 determines that the pass / fail result is not a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S1221, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1222, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned processing after S1216.

Next, in step S1212 or step S1220, a process (process after step S1223) when the pass / fail result is determined to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1223, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1224, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the above-mentioned processing after S1216.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S1112 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S1111, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S1112. judge.

When it is determined in step S1112 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S1113. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, after clearing the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1114, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1406 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game result is a "special deviation result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode without executing the processes after step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is not a "special off result" (when it is determined that the game result is a "big hit win"), the RAM 64 is set to the RAM 64 in step S1402. 2 Determine whether or not the result display unit flag is set.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Since it is shown to be to be performed, the first support mode setting process of step S1403 is executed. This first support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode that has been shifted to the upper operating port 36 with the winning of the game ball.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 Since it indicates that the variable display is to be started, the second support mode setting process of step S1404 is executed. This second support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode that has been shifted to the lower operating port 37 with the winning of the game ball.
Hereinafter, the first support mode setting process in step S1403 and the second support mode setting process in step S1404 will be described in detail.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first support mode setting process.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG. 23.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507, and the winning / failing lottery mode is high in step S1501. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507 will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low-frequency support mode), the high-frequency support flag is set in step S1505. Is set in RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets "1" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1507, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1510, the MPU 62 sets “34” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when it is determined that the support mode is the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1511. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1512, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the second support mode setting process.
In the second support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601 to S1611 as shown in FIG. 24.
In step S1601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1601 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606, and the winning / failing lottery mode is high in step S1601. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 is executed.

First, the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606 will be described.
In step S1602, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1603. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1604, the MPU 62 sets "34" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when the support mode is determined not to be the high frequency support mode in step S1602 (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1605. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1606, the MPU 62 sets "0" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

After executing the process of step S1604 or the process of step S1606, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

Next, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 will be described.
In step S1607, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1608. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1609, the MPU 62 sets "34" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low-frequency support mode), the high-frequency support flag is set in step S1610. Is set in RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1611, the MPU 62 sets "34" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

After executing the process of step S1609 or the process of step S1611, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the value of the game count counter set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process. Specifically, FIG. 25 shows the first variable display and the second variable display that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and the first support. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the value of the game count counter RTC set in the mode setting process or the 2nd support mode setting process.

The value of the game count counter RTC set in the first support mode setting process (process when the game ball shifts to the open / close execution mode triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36) is as shown in the left column of FIG. 25. In addition, it differs depending on the combination of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the value of the game count counter RTC is 34 times.
In the case of the combination of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the value of the game count counter RTC is one.
In the case of a combination other than these, the value of the game count counter RTC becomes 0 times. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In addition, the value of the game count counter RTC set in the second support mode setting process (processing when the game ball shifts to the open / close execution mode triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37) is shown in the right column of FIG. As shown, it differs depending on the combination of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the value of the game count counter RTC is 0 times. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.
In the case of combinations other than these, the value of the game count counter RTC is 34 times.

Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until one or 34 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag after digesting one or 34 game rounds. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In the following description, the high-frequency support mode that continues until one game round, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter RTC, is exhausted is also referred to as a short-term high-frequency support mode, and is set in the game count counter RTC. The high-frequency support mode that continues until the 34 game times, which is the end reference number of times, is exhausted, is also referred to as a long-term high-frequency support mode.

The MPU 62 executes these processes in the electric service fluctuation end process in step S808 described above. The process of ending the electric service fluctuation in step S808 will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the processes after step S1405 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.
After executing the first support mode setting process in step S1403 or the second support mode setting process in step S1404, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1405. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode.
In step S1406, the MPU 62 sets “3” to the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result (unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability result flag, and Clear the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. There is.

Here, the high-probability mode continues until the three game times, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability number counter STC, are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high-probability mode flag when it has completed three game rounds. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes in the variable end process of step S508 described above. Hereinafter, the variable end processing in step S508 will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variation end process.
In the variable end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701 to S1709, as shown in FIG.
In step S1701, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit) in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display (variation end execution process).

In step S1702, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability number set in step S1406 of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1703. Update by subtracting 1 from the value of the counter STC. Here, the variable command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC.
In step S1704, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high-accuracy number counter STC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high-accuracy number counter STC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high probability count counter STC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1705. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode.

In this way, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win", the gaming state shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) ends regardless of the current gaming state. .. The high-probability mode continues until the three game times, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability number counter STC, is exhausted.
In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit winning", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

After executing the process of step S1705, if it is determined in step S1702 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, or if it is determined in step S1704 that the high probability number counter STC is not "0" or less, the MPU62 Determines in step S1706 whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low-frequency support mode), the variation ends without executing the processing after step S1707. End the process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the game set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process in step S1707. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the count counter RTC. Here, the variable command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the game count counter RTC.

In step S1708, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game count counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the game count counter RTC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the variable end process without executing the process after step S1709.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the game count counter RTC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1709. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the variable end processing.

In this way, when the winning / fail lottery results in "big hit winning" and the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is set to the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After the end, it shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode continues until one or 34 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is exhausted.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode function as a game state switching unit for switching between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.
Specifically, when the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are won as a result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Switching to high probability mode.
Further, in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the number of a plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode (4 in the present embodiment). The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the holding information of a predetermined number smaller than the predetermined number (3 in the present embodiment) is notified.

In the present embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are won as a result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. In some cases, the mode is switched to the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number (3 in the present embodiment) is notified. The low-probability mode and the high-probability mode may be switched based on the conditions of. In short, the gaming state switching unit may switch between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, after switching to the high probability mode, the lower operating port 37 is temporarily switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. It also functions as a state switching unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 opens and closes in an advantageous manner for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the mode.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric service fluctuation end processing.
In the electric service fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG. 27.
In step S1801, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the processing of step S1006 or step S1007 of the electric service fluctuation start processing executed when the variable display unit 46 is started to display the variation (finally in the accessory display unit 46). (Information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the accessory display unit 46 which is being variablely displayed at the end of the electric service game round (the display control of the accessory display unit 46 is performed. Electric service fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric service winning / failing result is the “electrical service opening winning”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the result of winning or failing the electric service is not "winning the electric service open", the MPU 62 ends the electric service fluctuation end process without executing the process after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the result of winning or failing the electric service is "winning the electric service open", the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the high-frequency electric service release execution process in step S1804. In the high-frequency electric function opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a by executing the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 performs the low frequency power supply in step S1805. Executes the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric function opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a by executing the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b.
After executing the high-frequency electric service release execution process in step S1804 or the low-frequency electric service release execution process in step S1805, the MPU 62 ends the electric service variation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is larger when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, as compared with the low-frequency electric combination opening execution process. The opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also long. Further, in the high-frequency electric service opening execution process, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in one electric service opening state is shorter than the one-time opening time. ing.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to execute control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile and requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and displays various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S2101, whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command in step S2102. Is determined.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2103. In this symbol determination process, the MPU 92 relates to a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L when the game result is determined to be the "most advantageous result". Determine the information. The numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result", the game result is the "normal off result" based on the content of the type command in step S2104. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round high probability result". In the case of any of the above, in step S2105, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normally out-of-order result" in the winning / failing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2106. In this symbol determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop display finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the above-mentioned combination of symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of the symbols of the reach display by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.
Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern in step S2107 will be described in detail.

<Determining the production pattern>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2210 as shown in FIG.
In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 whether or not the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94. This high-probability suggestion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to suggest to the player that the mode is in the high-probability mode. The MPU 92 sets a high probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 when the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", and "unspecified small". When the result is "round high accuracy result", the high accuracy suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared. The process of setting or clearing the high-accuracy suggestion flag will be described later.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 executes the high probability number notification determination process in step S2203. In this high-accuracy number notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variable command.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high probability suggestion flag is not set in the RAM 94, in step S2204, the support mode is the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command. It is determined whether or not it is.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2204 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 sets the high probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 in step S2205, and then performs the high probability number notification determination process in step S2203 described above. Run.
As described above, in the MPU 92, even if the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the support mode is the high frequency support mode. , The high-accuracy suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94, and the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 is executed.

After executing the high-probability number notification determination process in step S2203, the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it is determined to be the low-probability mode), or in step S2204. If it is determined that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, in step S2206, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2206 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. In this game count notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the value of the game count counter RTC based on the content of the variable command.
After executing the game number notification determination process of step S2207, or when it is determined in step S2206 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when it is determined that the support mode is the low frequency support mode), the MPU 92 is step S2208. In, it is determined whether or not the variation display information is the second variation display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variation display information is the second variation display, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2209.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variation display information is not the second variation display (when it is determined to be the first variation display), the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2212. The MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received, and if it is determined that the command is received, the ring buffer is before executing the processing in step S2212 or later. Read and clear the short-term high-frequency support mode command from.

In step S2209, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
If the MPU 92 determines that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has been received in step S2209, the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210. In this special game state notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the special game state. The special gaming state will be described in detail later.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2209 that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has not been received, in step S2211, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency. Determine if it is in support mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process of step S2210 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is not the low frequency support mode, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2212.
As described above, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variation display information is the second variation display during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode or the stay in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the step. The special game state notification determination process of S2210 is executed.

After executing the special game state notification determination process of step S2210, the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variation display information is not the second variation display (when it is determined to be the first variation display), or step S2211. If it is determined that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is not the low frequency support mode, the reach display setting process is executed in step S2212.
In this reach display setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the reach display, and if it is determined to generate the reach display, sets the type of the reach display, the duration of the effect, and the like.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the process of determining the effect pattern.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2108 will be described with reference to FIG. 30.
In step S2108, the MPU 92 processes the fluctuation start command including the value of the high probability count counter STC, the value of the game count counter RTC, and the information related to the special game state, and the processing of any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106. Set the stop result command including the information related to the stop result determined in. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 creates a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the variable command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S2110 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S2110. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the MPU 92 is used for the open / close execution mode. Select production A as the production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed four times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the selection results of the effects A to C.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (the game result is the "unspecified small round high probability result"). If it is determined), the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S2115.

After executing the process of step S2114 or step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 32, the pachinko machine 10 has, as game results excluding the “normal loss result”, the success / failure result of the “big hit winning” and the “special loss result”, and the “unspecified small round high probability result” and “explicit”. It has a "small round high accuracy result" and a "most advantageous result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 32, the “special missed result” is a game result selected when the “big hit winning” is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol × in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special off result", the open / close execution mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
In the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. are doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Further, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S2115, the symbol display device 47 is high in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The image clearly indicating that the mode is in the probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special off result" or an "unspecified small round high accuracy result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.
In the "high-probability support mode", since the high-probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2205, the high-probability mode is changed to the "unspecified low-round high-probability result" in the distribution lottery. Even so, the player can exceptionally know that the winning / failing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. Further, in the "explicit small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 4 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 4 times in a long-time mode. Further, in the "most advantageous result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Further, in the "most advantageous result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, it is clearly shown that the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. The image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "most advantageous result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

As described above, the support mode is set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process based on the combination of the win / fail lottery mode, the support mode, and the variable display information (Fig.). 25).

<About the flow at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.
As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 has a "big hit win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure) and a case where the specified game times have been completed without becoming a "big hit win" (see the dotted arrow in the figure). ) To shift to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.
In addition, FIG. 33 shows a high probability mode (high probability) and a low probability mode (low probability) winning / failing lottery mode, and a high frequency support mode (high frequency) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency) support mode. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the probability mode and the high frequency support mode are shown in blocks BL11 to BL17.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display screen, a first hold lamp unit, and a second hold lamp unit of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display when the second hold lamp unit is not lit and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 34 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 34 (A). FIG. 34 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after FIG. 34 (B). FIG. 34 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 34 (C). FIG. 34 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 34 (D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

After executing the above-mentioned main process that is started when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 enters a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33 (block BL11). In the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36, and the game times are displayed in the first variation. On the other hand, since the game ball rarely wins a prize in the lower operating port 37, the second holding lamp portion 49b is not lit. In FIG. 34 (A), the maximum number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a is four.

In the block BL11, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result as shown in FIG. 34 (B). The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.
In the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 38b is set to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 wins a big prize. You will win a prize in the mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operating port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball in the large winning opening 38a, the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The ball will also win a prize in the upper operating port 36.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the "most advantageous result" in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

In the block BL12, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 34 (D), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. In addition, since FIG. 34 (D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation shows the "most advantageous result" after shifting to the block BL12, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 47. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed in the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, in the block BL12, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL11 when the game rounds of three rotations are completed without becoming a “big hit win” (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL13). In the block BL13, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "one rotation after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (short-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is one rotation. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the second holding lamp unit 49b lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 also wins a prize in the upper operating port 36. In other words, the upper actuating port 36 and the lower actuating port 37 are arranged in the same path. Therefore, the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36. In FIG. 34 (E), the maximum number of lightings of the first holding lamp unit 49a and the second holding lamp unit 49b is four, respectively.

FIG. 35 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first hold lamp unit, and the second hold at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows the lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a display screen G when a “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to the block BL13. FIG. 35B is a diagram showing a display screen G during the second variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after FIG. 35A. FIG. 35 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where three rotations of the game are completed without obtaining the “most advantageous result”. FIG. 35 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display of FIG. 35 (C). FIG. 35 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 35 (D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 35.

In the block BL13, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 35 (A), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. In addition, since FIG. 35A shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation shows the "most advantageous result" after shifting to the block BL13, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 47. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed in the upper left of the screen G.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (block BL14). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL14, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, the game to the upper working port 36 is performed. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for digestion. Therefore, the game times are being displayed in the second variation.

When the pachinko machine 10 has completed three rotations of the game in the block BL14 without becoming a "big hit win" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and low frequency support. It becomes a mode (block BL15). In the block BL15, the MPU 102 is in the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 remains, that is, in the case where the second fluctuation display is in progress. Is informed that it is in a special gaming state based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL15, the MPU 102 has the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35 (C). By displaying "Great Chance Zone !!", it is notified that the game is in a special game state. In addition, in FIG. 35 (C), since the rest of the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is one in the second fluctuation display, the second hold lamp unit 49b is not lit. ..
On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the block BL14 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL12 again.

In the block BL15, when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 35 (D), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL16). In the block BL16, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (E), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "high accuracy middle and 3 more rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (long-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is 34 rotations. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

Then, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display in the block BL16 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL16 again.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the second variation display does not give the "most advantageous result" in the block BL15 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), or in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second variation display. When the game rounds of 34 rotations are completed without becoming a "big hit win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process shifts to the block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure) in the special gaming state of the block BL15. .. Therefore, the special gaming state is a state in which the mode shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display.
In FIG. 34 (E), the maximum number of lightings of the second holding lamp unit 49b is four. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 35, the number of rotations of the second variation display in the special gaming state is one rotation. Will be. Therefore, the winning probability of the second variation display in the special gaming state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special gaming state unless the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b is set to 4 or more during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 36 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode when the “most advantageous result” is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first hold lamp unit, and the second. It is a figure which shows the hold lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing a display screen G when the first variation display of the first rotation does not result in the “most advantageous result” after shifting to the block BL13. FIG. 36 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where two rotations of the game are completed without obtaining the “most advantageous result”. FIG. 36 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display of FIG. 36 (B). FIG. 36 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the second variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 36 (C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 36.

As shown in FIG. 33, when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the “most advantageous result” in the first fluctuation display in the block BL13 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode. (Block BL17). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL17, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "high accuracy middle and two more rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, the game to the upper working port 36 is performed. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for digestion. Therefore, the game times are being displayed in the second variation.

When the pachinko machine 10 has completed two rotations of the game in the block BL17 without becoming a "big hit" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and low frequency support. It becomes a mode (block BL15). In the block BL15, the MPU 102 is in the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 remains, that is, in the case where the second fluctuation display is in progress. Is informed that it is in a special gaming state based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL15, the MPU 102 has the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35 (C). By displaying "Great Chance Zone !!", it is notified that the game is in a special game state. In addition, in FIG. 36B, the rest of the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is two including the one in the second fluctuation display, so that the second hold lamp unit 49b The number of lights is one.
On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the block BL17 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL12 again.

In the block BL15, when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 36 (C), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL16). In the block BL16, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (long-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is 34 rotations. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

Then, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display in the block BL16 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL16 again.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the second variation display does not give the "most advantageous result" in the block BL15 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), or in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second variation display. When the game rounds of 34 rotations are completed without becoming a "big hit win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process shifts to the block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure) in the special gaming state of the block BL15. .. Therefore, the special gaming state is a state in which the mode shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display.
In addition, in FIG. 34 (E), the number of lightings of the second holding lamp unit 49b is the maximum of four, so in the example of FIG. 36, the number of rotations of the second variation display in the special gaming state is two rotations. Will be. Therefore, the winning probability of the second variation display in the special gaming state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 36, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special gaming state unless the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b is set to 3 or more during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game state transition process, after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is used. Functions as the most advantageous game state transition unit that shifts the game state to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) that is advantageous for the player when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in is won. do.
In other words, the game state transition process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. The most advantageous gaming state transition unit that shifts the gaming state to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous gaming state), which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when the result of the executed internal lottery is won. Functions as.

In the present embodiment, in the game state transition process, after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process, the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the above is won, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Based on other conditions, the gaming state may be shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In short, the game state transition process is performed with the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 is won. , The gaming state may be transitioned to a long-term high-frequency support mode that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.
Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the gaming state. The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are switched to the high probability mode when the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is won. , The result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of hold information (three times in this embodiment) smaller than the number of the plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is notified. Switch from high probability mode to low probability mode. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high probability mode is such that the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of reserved information, which is smaller than the number of the plurality of reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit, is notified. It is a probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high probability mode is the probability of winning a 1/3 lottery within 3 rotations.

On the other hand, the continuation rate of the long-term high frequency support mode is the sum of the probability of winning the 1/3 lottery within 3 rotations and the probability of winning the 1/30 lottery within the remaining 31 rotations. Therefore, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.

In the present embodiment, by setting the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the long-term high-frequency support mode is a game more than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Although the gaming state is advantageous for the player, the gaming state may be advantageous for the player by setting conditions other than the continuation rate. In short, the most advantageous gaming state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode when the first holding lamp unit is not turned on.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 has a "big hit win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure) and a case where the specified game times have been completed without becoming a "big hit win" (see the dotted arrow in the figure). ) To shift to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.
In addition, FIG. 37 shows a high probability mode (high probability) and a low probability mode (low probability) winning / failing lottery mode, and a high frequency support mode (high frequency) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency) support mode. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the probability mode and the high frequency support mode are shown in blocks BL21 to BL26.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device, a first holding lamp unit, and a second holding lamp unit at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode when the first holding lamp unit is not turned on. Specifically, FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display when the second hold lamp unit is not lit and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 38 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 38 (A). FIG. 38 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after FIG. 38 (B). FIG. 38 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 38 (C). FIG. 38 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 38 (D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

After executing the above-mentioned main process that is started when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 enters a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 37 (block BL21). In the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36, and the game times are displayed in the first variation. On the other hand, since the game ball rarely wins a prize in the lower operating port 37, the second holding lamp portion 49b is not lit. In FIG. 38 (A), the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a is 0.

In the block BL21, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result as shown in FIG. 38 (B). The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.
In the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 38b is set to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 wins a big prize. You will win a prize in the mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operating port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball in the large winning opening 38a, the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The ball will also win a prize in the upper operating port 36.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the "most advantageous result" in the first variation display in the block BL21 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL21 as it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (block BL22). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL22, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.
In addition, in FIG. 38C, since the game ball did not win the upper operating port 36 in the opening / closing execution mode of FIG. 38B, the number of lights of the first holding lamp portion 49a is 0. ing.

In the block BL22, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Since FIG. 38 (D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation shows the "most advantageous result" after shifting to the block BL22, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 47. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed in the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, in the block BL22, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL21 when the game rounds of three rotations are completed without becoming a “big hit win” (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL23). In the block BL23, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "one rotation after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (short-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is one rotation. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the second holding lamp unit 49b lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 also wins a prize in the upper operating port 36. In other words, the upper actuating port 36 and the lower actuating port 37 are arranged in the same path. Therefore, the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36. In addition, in FIG. 38 (E), since the game ball did not win the upper operating port 36 during the stay in the short-term high frequency support mode and in the open / close execution mode of FIG. 38 (D), the first holding lamp portion 49a The number of lights is 0. Further, the maximum number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b is four.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, the game to the upper working port 36 is performed. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for digestion. Therefore, the game times are being displayed in the second variation.

In the block BL23, the MPU 102 is in the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 remains, that is, in the case where the second fluctuation display is in progress. Is informed that it is in a special gaming state based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL23, the MPU 102 has the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 38 (E). By displaying "Great Chance Zone !!", it is notified that the game is in a special game state.

FIG. 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first hold lamp unit, and the second hold at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows the lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a display screen G when a “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display of the first rotation after shifting to the block BL23. FIG. 39 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the second variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 39 (A).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39.

In the block BL23, when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL24). In the block BL24, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (long-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is 34 rotations. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

Then, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display in the block BL24 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again.
On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 has completed 34 rotations of the game in the block BL24 without becoming a "big hit win" in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display (see the dotted arrow in the figure). Moves to block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure) in the special gaming state of the block BL23. .. Therefore, the special gaming state is a state in which the mode shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display.
The winning probability of the second variation display in the special gaming state during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode is 1/3.

FIG. 40 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode when the “most advantageous result” is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first hold lamp unit, and the second. It is a figure which shows the hold lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 40A is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where the “most advantageous result” is not obtained in the second variation display of the first rotation after shifting to the block BL23. FIG. 40B is a diagram showing a display screen G in the case where two rotations of the game are completed without obtaining the “most advantageous result”. FIG. 40 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display of FIG. 40 (B). FIG. 40 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the second variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 40 (C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 40.

In the block BL23, when the “most advantageous result” is not obtained in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 37. (Block BL25). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL25, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "high accuracy middle and two more rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

When the pachinko machine 10 has completed two rotations of the game in the block BL25 without becoming a "big hit" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and low frequency support. It becomes a mode (block BL26). In the block BL26, the MPU 102 is in the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 remains, that is, in the case where the second fluctuation display is in progress. Is informed that it is in a special gaming state based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL26, the MPU 102 has the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 40 (B). By displaying "Great Chance Zone !!", it is notified that the game is in a special game state. In FIG. 40B, the remaining hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section is two including the one in the second variation display, so that the second hold lamp section 49b The number of lights is one.
On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the block BL25 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL22 again.

In the block BL26, when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL24). In the block BL24, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations after chance time" on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (long-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is 34 rotations. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

Then, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display in the block BL24 (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the second variation display does not give the "most advantageous result" in the block BL26 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), or in the block BL24, the first variation display or the second variation display. When the game rounds of 34 rotations are completed without becoming a "big hit win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process shifts to the block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure) in the special gaming state of the block BL26. .. Therefore, the special gaming state is a state in which the mode shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the second variation display.
In addition, in FIG. 38 (E), the number of lightings of the second holding lamp unit 49b is the maximum of four, so in the example of FIG. 40, the number of rotations of the second variation display in the special gaming state is two rotations. Will be. Therefore, the winning probability of the second variation display in the special gaming state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special gaming state of the block BL26 unless the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b is set to 3 or more during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first holding lamp unit 49a is not turned on, the game state transition process is performed after switching to the high probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is first won, the game state is set to the long-term high frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) which is advantageous for the player. Functions as the most advantageous game state transition unit.

Here, as described above, since the high probability mode executes the internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode, the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information from the second time onward in the high probability mode is performed. The winning probability is high when the result is notified (block BL25), and the winning probability is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Further, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability becomes high (block BL23). According to this, the player is most expected to win when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode have a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the pending information is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of hold information is notified in the high probability mode, and the remaining hold information in the subsequent low probability mode. If you are informed of the result of the internal lottery associated with, you will expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 holds a plurality of holdings in which the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit are stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit. Since the notification is given priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is notified regardless of whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. It is possible to give priority to the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of reserved information stored in. Therefore, since the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

(4) Since the high probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode, the winning probability is notified when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of reserved information is notified in the high probability mode. Will be high, and the winning probability will be low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified in the subsequent low probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player decides on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Further attention will be paid. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) Since the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can launch the game ball on the same path to launch the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. You can put a game ball in the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(7) The game state transition process is performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is won, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are won. And, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 And the combination of low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(8) When the first hold lamp unit 49a is not turned on, the game state transition process first displays the second result after switching to the high probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the part is won, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode. , When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37 is won, the game state is in the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. To migrate. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(9) When the first hold lamp unit 49a is not turned on, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information smaller than the number of the plurality of pending information is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of reserved information from the second time onward is notified in the high probability mode, and in the subsequent low probability mode. Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining hold information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode. .. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes a first holding lamp unit 49a. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31A is different from the first embodiment in that the first holding lamp portion 49a is not provided.
In the description of the game board 31A, components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment and having different shapes and arrangements will be described with the same reference numerals.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
In addition, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31A has a first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the upper operating port 36 and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the lower operating port 37. It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the lower operating port 37 and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the upper operating port 36.

Here, the game board 31A includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 has a transparent portion 381a formed transparently (or translucently) so that the variable winning device 38 can be visually recognized from the front side, and an opaque portion formed around the transparent portion 381a and formed opaquely. It is provided with a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21.

The large winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31A so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31A, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31A. By burying it in 31A, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is called one round game.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The design display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the symbol display device 47, and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the symbol display device 47. ..

The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third holding lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49b and 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate the reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The holding area Ra for the first result display unit provided as the storage means for the first ball entry unit includes one storage area. The hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store.

The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second ball entry section storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 37 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four prizes for the game balls to the lower operating port 37 are held. Further, the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the reserved number stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE has the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Further, the electric service holding area 64c includes an electric service execution area (not shown) like the holding ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more, and is a singular number. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process and the game rotation control process for the operating port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process and the game time control process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S208A as shown in FIG. 43.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the upper operating port 36. Is determined. When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 36, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach, which were updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing in step S208A. The set of each value of the random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won a prize in the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not the above is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 37.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 37, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit.

In step S205A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN set in step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start hold storage number RbN is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start hold storage number RbN is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the second start hold storage number RbN in step S206A. ..

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206.
For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37 is four, and the second holding lamp unit 49b is lit by the number corresponding to the number of holdings.

<Game times control process>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game rotation control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG. 44.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display in step S502, that is, the game round is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503A to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress process of steps S510A to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503A to S505 will be described.
In step S503A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reserved information is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit or the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the hold information is not stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, in step S504A, the MPU 62 determines. The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504A will be described in detail.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. 45.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S603 and S605, and in step S601. If it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Executes the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the upper action port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S603 and S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Is shown to start (first variation display).

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Is shown to start (second variation display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that shifts the hold information for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 37. It contains information to make 90 recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 37 decreases.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progress process of steps S510A to S509 will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
The MPU 62 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game rounds in steps S510A to S509. Execute the process.

In step S510A, the MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 does not store the hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display (variable end execution process).

Here, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game field or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done.
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol row to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the game state transition process is the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, as in the case where the first hold lamp unit 49a in the first embodiment is not turned on. After switching to the high probability mode, if the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is first won, the long-term high frequency support mode that is advantageous for the player ( It functions as the most advantageous gaming state transition unit that shifts the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state).

Here, as described above, since the high probability mode executes the internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode, the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information from the second time onward in the high probability mode is performed. The winning probability is high when the result is notified (block BL25), and the winning probability is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Further, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability becomes high (block BL23). According to this, the player is most expected to win when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode have a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the pending information is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of hold information is notified in the high probability mode, and the remaining hold information in the subsequent low probability mode. If you are informed of the result of the internal lottery associated with, you will expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Since the high probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode, the winning probability is notified when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of reserved information is notified in the high probability mode. Will be high, and the winning probability will be low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified in the subsequent low probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(4) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player decides on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Further attention will be paid. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The player can easily generate the game ball into the upper operating port 36 by launching the game ball on the left-handed route, and by launching the game ball on the right-handed route. , It is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the lower actuating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

(6) The game state transition process is performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is won, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are won. And, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 And the combination of low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The game state transition process is first associated with the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode in the shift process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. If the result of the internal lottery is won, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. When the result of the internal lottery executed as an opportunity is won, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(8) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode have a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the pending information is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of reserved information from the second time onward is notified in the high probability mode, and in the subsequent low probability mode. Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining hold information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode. .. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, respectively.
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game board 31B is different from the first embodiment in that it includes one through gate 41 provided above the upper operating port 36.

According to this embodiment, when the game ball is inserted into the through gate 41 in order to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state, the game ball is always inserted into the upper operating port 36. The situation is the same as when the first holding lamp unit 49a in the first embodiment is turned on.
Specifically, the game state transition process is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is won, it functions as the most advantageous gaming state transition unit for shifting the gaming state to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous gaming state) which is advantageous for the player.
In other words, the game state transition process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. The most advantageous gaming state transition unit that shifts the gaming state to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous gaming state), which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when the result of the executed internal lottery is won. Functions as.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the variable end process. When the result of the internal lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode have a predetermined number smaller than the number of the plurality of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the pending information is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of hold information is notified in the high probability mode, and the remaining hold information in the subsequent low probability mode. If you are informed of the result of the internal lottery associated with, you will expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 holds a plurality of holdings in which the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit are stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit. Since the notification is given priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is notified regardless of whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. It is possible to give priority to the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of reserved information stored in. Therefore, since the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

(4) Since the high probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the low probability mode, the winning probability is notified when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of reserved information is notified in the high probability mode. Will be high, and the winning probability will be low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified in the subsequent low probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player decides on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. Further attention will be paid. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(6) Since the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can launch the game ball on the same path to launch the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37. You can put a game ball in the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

(7) The game state transition process is performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is won, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are won. And, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the gaming state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous for the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 And the combination of low-probability mode and high-probability mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first support mode setting process and the electric service fluctuation end process are different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the first support mode setting process and the electric service fluctuation end process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first support mode setting process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG. 47.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C, and the winning / failing lottery mode is high in step S1501. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, the support mode setting process for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low-frequency support mode), the high-frequency support flag is set in step S1505. Is set in RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets "1" to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S1513C, the MPU 62 executes a special electric service opening time setting process. In this special electric service opening time setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 sets the special electric service opening time flag in the RAM 64.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (when the distribution result is "explicit small round high probability result" or "unspecified small round high probability result". If it is determined that there is), the special electric service opening time flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. This special electric service release time flag is a flag for specifying that the special electric service release execution process is executed. The special electric service opening execution process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1513C, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1510, the MPU 62 sets “34” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when it is determined that the support mode is the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 is stored in the RAM 64 in step S1511. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1512, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game count counter RTC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of electric service fluctuation end processing.
In the electric service fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG. 48.
In step S1801, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the processing of step S1006 or step S1007 of the electric service fluctuation start processing executed when the variable display unit 46 is started to display the variation (finally in the accessory display unit 46). (Information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the accessory display unit 46 which is being variablely displayed at the end of the electric service game round (the display control of the accessory display unit 46 is performed. Electric service fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning or losing the electric service is "winning to open the electric service".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the result of winning or failing the electric service is not "winning the electric service open", the MPU 62 ends the electric service fluctuation end process without executing the process after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the result of winning or failing the electric service is "winning the electric service open", the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C whether or not the special electric service opening time flag is set in the RAM 64.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric service release time flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the special electric service release execution command in step S1807C. The MPU 62 transmits the special electric function release execution command set in step S1807C to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the special electric service opening execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.
In step S1808C, the MPU 62 executes the special electric service opening execution process. In the special electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a by executing the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric service release time flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the high-frequency electric service release execution process in step S1804. In the high-frequency electric function opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a by executing the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b.
After executing the special electric service opening execution process in step S1808C or the high-frequency electric service opening execution process in step S1804, the MPU 62 ends the electric service fluctuation end process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode), the MPU 62 performs the low frequency power supply in step S1805. Executes the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric function opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a by executing the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric service fluctuation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is larger when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, as compared with the low-frequency electric combination opening execution process. The opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also long. Further, in the high-frequency electric service opening execution process, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in one electric service opening state is shorter than the one-time opening time. ing.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

Further, in the special electric role opening execution process, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is larger when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, as compared with the electric combination opening execution process for high frequency. The opening time for setting the object 37a to the open state is also long. Specifically, the opening time of the special electric service opening execution process is set to 5 sec (long-term electric service opening time). Further, the opening time of the high-frequency electric service opening execution process is set to 2 sec (short-term electric service opening time). Further, in the special electric service opening execution process, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in one electric service opening state is shorter than the one opening time. ..
Therefore, in the special electric service opening execution process, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 as compared with the high-frequency electric service opening execution process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a process different from that of the third embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, steps S2101 to S2116 are executed in substantially the same manner as in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment in that steps S2117C to 2119C are executed before the step S2116 is executed.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the special electric service release execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines that the special electric service release execution command has been received in step S2117C, the MPU 92 executes the special electric service release notification process in step S2118C. In this special electric service opening notification process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the special electric service opening.
Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of the above-mentioned step S2003 based on the determination of the notification of the opening of the special electric service.

In step S2119C, a special electric service release notification command related to the notification of the special electric service release determined in the special electric service release notification process of step S2118C is set. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special electric service release notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This special electric service release notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the special electric service release notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the special electric service release notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the special electric service opening notification effect.

After executing the process of step S2119C, or when it is determined in step S2117C that the special electric service release execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2116 and subsequent steps as in the third embodiment. do.

<About the flow at the time of transition between the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode>
FIG. 50 shows the display screen of the design display device at the time of transition to the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode, the first hold lamp unit, and the second hold when the “most advantageous result” is obtained at the time of transition to the short-term high frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows the lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display when the second hold lamp unit is not lit and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 50A. FIG. 50C is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after FIG. 50B. FIG. 50 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 50 (C). FIG. 50 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 50 (D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 50.

After executing the above-mentioned main process that is started when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 enters a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33 (block BL11). In the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls that have won the prize in the upper operating port 36, and the game times are displayed in the first variation. On the other hand, since the game ball rarely wins a prize in the lower operating port 37, the second holding lamp portion 49b is not lit. In FIG. 50A, the maximum number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a is four.

In the block BL11, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result as shown in FIG. 50 (B). The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.
In the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 38b is set to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 wins a big prize. You will win a prize in the mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operating port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball in the large winning opening 38a, the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The ball will also win a prize in the upper operating port 36.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the "most advantageous result" in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

In the block BL12, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Since FIG. 50 (D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation shows the "most advantageous result" after shifting to the block BL12, the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 47. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed in the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, in the block BL12, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL11 when the game rounds of three rotations are completed without becoming a “big hit win” (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL13). In the block BL13, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "one rotation after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (short-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is one rotation. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the second holding lamp unit 49b lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 also wins a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36. In FIG. 50 (E), the maximum number of lightings of the first holding lamp unit 49a and the second holding lamp unit 49b is four, respectively.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 executes the special electric service opening notification process in step S2118C in the block BL13. Based on the content of the special electric service release notification command transmitted from, the special electric service release notification effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the MPU 102 displays "long open !!" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby using the electric accessory 37a as a long-term electric accessory. Notifies that the open time high frequency support mode is set.
The subsequent flow is the same as that of the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

FIG. 51 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first hold lamp unit, and the winning / failing lottery mode and the symbol display device at the time of transition to the support mode when the “explicit small round high accuracy result” is obtained at the transition to the short-term high frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows the 2nd hold lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 51 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display when the second hold lamp unit is not lit and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 51 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen G when the “most advantageous result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 51 (A). FIG. 51 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after FIG. 51 (B). FIG. 51 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen G when “explicit small round high accuracy result” is obtained in the first variation display of FIG. 51 (C). FIG. 51 (E) is a diagram showing a display screen G during the first variation display in the case of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after FIG. 51 (D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 51.

After executing the above-mentioned main process that is started when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 enters a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 33 (block BL11). In the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the upper operating port 36, and the game times are displayed in the first variation. On the other hand, since the game ball rarely wins a prize in the lower operating port 37, the second holding lamp portion 49b is not lit. In FIG. 51 (A), the maximum number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a is four.

In the block BL11, when the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 is the same as the stop result as shown in FIG. 51 (B). The combination of symbols having the number (for example, 7/7/7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92.
In the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 38b is set to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 wins a big prize. You will win a prize in the mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operating port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball in the large winning opening 38a, the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The ball will also win a prize in the upper operating port 36.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the "most advantageous result" in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 in the block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-accuracy number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "high accuracy middle and 3 more rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases.

In the block BL12, when the first variation display shows the "explicit small round high accuracy result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 stops as shown in FIG. 51 (D). As a result, a special combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. In addition, since FIG. 51 (D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation shows the "explicit small round high accuracy result" after shifting to the block BL12, the MPU 102 is a symbol display device. At the upper left of the display screen G of 47, "high accuracy middle 2 more rotations" is displayed.
On the other hand, in the block BL12, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL11 when the game rounds of three rotations are completed without becoming a “big hit win” (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (block BL13). In the block BL13, the MPU 92 executes the high-accuracy number notification determination process in step S2203 and executes the game number notification determination process in step S2207. Therefore, the MPU 102 is based on the content of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. The value of the high probability count counter STC and the value of the game count counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the MPU 102 is a game of staying in the high probability mode by displaying "3 rotations in high accuracy" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "one rotation after chance time" under the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game times of staying in the high frequency support mode (short-term high frequency support mode) can be determined. Notify that it is one rotation. The number of rotations of the game times staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of rotations of the game times staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. It will decrease with the decrease of.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the lower operating port 37 than the upper operating port 36, so that the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the firing handle 27. The game ball will win a prize in the lower operating port 37. Therefore, the second holding lamp unit 49b lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the lower operating port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27 also wins a prize in the upper operating port 36. Therefore, the first holding lamp unit 49a lights up according to the number of holding game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 36. In FIG. 51 (E), the maximum number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a is four. Further, the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b is two.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" (the distribution result is determined to be "explicit small round high probability result" or "unspecified small round high probability result". In the case of), since the special electric service release notification process is not executed in step S2118C in the block BL13, the MPU 102 does not execute the special electric service release notification effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the MPU 102 uses the electric accessory 37a as a short-term electric accessory by not displaying "Long opening !!" at the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Notifies that the open time high frequency support mode is set.
The subsequent flow is the same as that of the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode with a short-term electric service opening time that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter temporarily (first ball entry possible state). And, while temporarily allowing the game balls flowing down the game area to enter, the high frequency of the long-term electric service opening time allows more game balls to enter than the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time. It has a support mode (second ball entry possible state).
In addition, the high-frequency support mode with long-term electric service opening time has a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode with short-term electric service opening time, so that more games can be played than the high-frequency support mode with short-term electric service opening time. The ball can be entered.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time is set to have a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time, so that the high-frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time is set. It is possible to enter more game balls, but for example, by increasing the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, more game balls can be inserted than in the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric role opening time. It may be possible to enter the ball. In short, the second ball-entry state may allow more game balls to enter than the first ball-possible state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are the results of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. Based on the above, the lower actuating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time or the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time.
Specifically, in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or. When the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" (first winning result) is obtained, the lower operating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time, and the "most advantageous result". When (the second winning result) is obtained, the lower operating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode with the long-term electric service opening time.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. "Or" Unspecified low round high probability result ", switch to the high frequency support mode of short-term electric service opening time, and when it becomes" most advantageous result ", high frequency support of long-term electric service opening time Although the mode is switched, the high frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time or the high frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time may be switched based on the results of other internal lottery. In short, in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the lower operating port 37 is set to the low frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. It is sufficient to switch from the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time or the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time.

According to the present embodiment as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of the third embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(8) In the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, after switching to the high probability mode, the lower operating port 37 is changed from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode or the long term electric service opening time. Switch to high frequency support mode for hours. In addition, the game state transition process is a long-term advantage for the player over the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37 is won. Shift the game state to the high frequency support mode. According to this, the player is expected to be switched to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(9) The high-frequency support mode for long-term electric service opening time has more duration than the high-frequency support mode for short-term electric service opening time by setting the duration longer than the high-frequency support mode for short-term electric service opening time. Since it is possible to enter a game ball, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the high-frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time and the high-frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time.
(10) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode support the lower operating port 37 with low frequency based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. Since the mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time or the high-frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time, the player has an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. We will pay attention to the result of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(11) In the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" or "non-explicit result". When the "explicit small round high accuracy result" (first winning result) is obtained, the lower operating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time, and the "most advantageous result" (first winning result). When the result of winning 2) is obtained, the lower operating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time, so that the player becomes the "most advantageous result" and the opening / closing execution mode. It is expected that the transition process at the end and the variable end process will switch to the high-frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are the results of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. Based on the above, the lower actuating port 37 was switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode for the short-term electric service opening time or the high frequency support mode for the long-term electric service opening time.
On the other hand, for example, the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode emit sound when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 is won. Based on the content of the expected effect (for example, the type of reach display) executed by the control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operating port 37 is changed from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time. You may switch to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time.

Specifically, for example, the content of the expected effect executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is different from the first reach display (first expected effect) and the first reach display. The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are provided with the reach display of 2, and when the first reach display is executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower actuating port 37 is used. When the low frequency support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode with the short-term electric service opening time and the second reach display is executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operating port 37 is set to the low frequency support mode. You may switch to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time.
As described above, in this modification, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are set to the open / close execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36. It functions as an expectation effect execution means for executing an expectation effect that makes the player expect that the game state will be changed.
In this modification, the content of the expected effect is the type of reach display, but it may be the expected degree of reach display, or it may be the content of other expected effect such as the type of notice display.

According to such a modification, the following actions / effects can be obtained instead of (10) and (11) in the fourth embodiment.
(12) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode are performed by the voice emission control device 90 and the voice emission control device 90 when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36 is won. Based on the content of the expected effect executed by the display control device 100, the lower operating port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time or the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time. Therefore, the player pays attention to the content of the expected effect executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(13) In the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode, when the first reach display is executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operating port 37 is changed from the low frequency support mode. When switching to the high frequency support mode of the short-term electric service opening time and executing the second reach display on the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operating port 37 is opened from the low frequency support mode to the long-term electric service. Switch to high frequency support mode for hours. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 36, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 make a second. It is expected that the reach display of the above will be executed and the mode will be switched to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric service opening time in the transition process and the variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Varied examples of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like to the extent that the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the open / close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning games to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes by setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then opening and closing the total number of game balls to the large winning opening 38a when the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and the end is achieved by the elapse of a predetermined time. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to the time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open / close execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the upper limit duration of the long-term mode. Had had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of executions of the round game. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is different in the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b is different such as half-open or full-open. , It may be configured to set a plurality of types of open / close execution modes. Further, the aspect of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any one of "special off result", "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". The information related to the special symbol combination was determined as the stop result to be finally displayed on the line L, and the special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating the jackpot was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special off result" was set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the hold area Rb, the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the holding information related to the lower working port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 37 for digestion of game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the upper operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operating port 36 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and the control device of at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect of playing a game by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for playing games by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the fluctuation display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside may be displayed. The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (picture) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols of the symbols Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variable-displayed or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, a gaming machine is configured so that a player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating the buttons provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Modifications, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts a gaming state from a normal control state to a specific control state.
The normal control state is
The first game state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The second starting ball entry portion is
An inaccessible state (low frequency support mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is equipped with a ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The game state transition means is
A game state switching unit (transition process and variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode) that switches between the first game state and the second game state.
After switching to the second gaming state by the game state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit (opening / closing execution) that temporarily switches the second start ball entry unit from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. Transition processing and variable end processing at the end of the mode) and
After switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in the gaming state switching section, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting ball entry section is It is provided with a most advantageous gaming state transition unit (gaming state transition processing) that shifts the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Here, the inaccessible state of the second starting ball entry portion is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is completely inaccessible, but also a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of. In addition, the state in which the second starting ball can enter is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered temporarily. It may include a state of doing. In short, in the ball-entry state, the game ball flowing down the game area may be easier to enter into the second starting ball-in-ball section than in the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is a game ball to the second starting ball entry unit after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the ball is won, the gaming state is shifted to the most advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
A storage means for the second ball entry section (second) that stores a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section. 2 Equipped with a hold area Rb) for the result display
After switching to the second gaming state, the game state switching unit is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. The result of the internal lottery was notified, and the second gaming state was switched to the first gaming state.
The most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the internal lottery stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. A gaming machine characterized by shifting the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the internal lottery associated with the information is won.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the gaming state switching unit is a predetermined number smaller than the number of a plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching to the second gaming state. The second gaming state is switched to the first gaming state with the notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information of. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information is notified in the second gaming state, and then enters the first gaming state. If the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified, the winning is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
A storage means for the first ball entry section (first) for storing a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section. 1 Equipped with a hold area Ra) for the result display
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entry unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entry unit storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that notification is given priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry section in the storage means for the first ball entry section. Since the notification is given priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information, the second entry is made regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first entry section. The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the ball unit storage means can be preferentially notified. Therefore, since the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming machine pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 or the feature A3 of the present invention group.
The second gaming state is a gaming machine characterized by executing an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, since the second gaming state executes the internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state, the second gaming state is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information. The winning probability is high when the result of the internal lottery is notified, and the winning probability is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the first gaming state thereafter. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
When the game state switching unit wins the result of an internal lottery executed with the ball entering the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger, the second game state switching unit is the second game state. Switch to,
A gaming machine characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the gaming state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit is won, and the second game state switching unit is switched to the second game state. (2) The first from the second gaming state is triggered by notifying the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball entry section. Switch to the game state of. Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. It is a probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section or the second start entry section.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, so that the player can enter the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Further attention will be paid to the result of the internal lottery executed as an opportunity. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group.
The ball-entry state is
A first ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric service opening time) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered.
A second ball-entry state (long-term electric service) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter temporarily and allows more game balls to enter than the first ball-possible state. With high frequency support mode of opening time),
After switching to the second gaming state at the gaming state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second starting ball entry unit from the ball entry impossible state to the first ball entry enabled state or the ball entry state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a second ball-entry state.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit switches to the second gaming state by the game state switching unit, and then the second starting ball entry unit is changed from the non-entry state to the first ball entry state. Switch to the possible state or the second ballable state. In addition, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting entry section is won. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous for the player than. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-entry state at the ball-entry state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A6 of the present invention group,
By setting the duration of the second ball-entry state to be longer than that of the first ball-possible state, it is possible to enter more game balls than the first ball-possible state. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the second ball enterable state has more game balls than the first ball enterable state by setting the duration longer than the first ball enterable state. Since the ball can be entered, the configuration of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state can be simplified.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A6 or the feature A7 of the present invention group.
The ball entry state switching unit moves the second start ball entry section from the ball entry impossible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit is the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. Is switched from the non-entry state to the first possible entry state or the second possible entry state, so that the player can enter the game ball into the first start entry section as an opportunity for the internal lottery. We will pay attention to the result of. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A8 of the present invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section is
The first winning result ("explicit small round high probability result" or "unspecified small round high probability result") and
It has a second winning result (“most advantageous result”) that is different from the first winning result.
When the first winning result is obtained, the ball-entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entry unit from the ball-impossible state to the first ball-possible state, and the second winning state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impassable state to the second possible entry state.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, when the first winning result is obtained, the ball entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball entry unit from the non-entering state to the first ball entry capable state. When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the second ball entry state, so that the player can switch the ball entry state as the second winning result. It is expected that the club will be able to switch to the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A6 or the feature A7 of the present invention group.
Expectations that the player expects that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. The expected effect execution means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect is provided.
The expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means when the ball entry state switching unit wins the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state based on the contents of the above.

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, when the ball entry state switching unit wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit, the expected effect execution means. Based on the content of the expected effect executed in, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the first ballable state or the second ballable state, so that the player can expect the expected effect. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected production performed by the execution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A10 of the present invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
The first expected production (first reach display) and
It has a second expected effect (second reach display) that is different from the first expected effect.
When the first expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second start ball entry unit from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state. It is characterized in that when the second expected effect is executed by the switching and the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impassable state to the second possible entry state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, when the expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit enters the second starting ball entry unit from the incapable state to the first entry. When the ball is switched to the ball-capable state and the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the ball-impossible state to the second ball-capable state. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section, the player performs the second expected effect by the expected effect executing means. It is expected that the ball will be switched to the second ball-entry state by the ball-entry state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A11 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, since the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are arranged on the same path, the player launches the game ball on the same path. Allows the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A11 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a pachinko ball into the second starting ball entry section and makes it difficult to generate a gaming ball into the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature A13 of the present invention group, the player can easily generate the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion by launching the game ball in the first path. By launching the game ball in the second path, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state includes a plurality of game states having different probabilities of winning the big hit lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game states.

However, since the transition of the gaming state is sorted by the lottery when the big hit lottery is won, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts a gaming state from a normal control state to a specific control state.
The normal control state is
The first game state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The game state transition means is
A game state switching unit (transition process and variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode) that switches between the first game state and the second game state.
When the result of the internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section or the second start entry section is won, the first start entry section and the second start entry section are won. Based on the combination of the starting ball entry portion and the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the most advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a most advantageous gaming state transition unit (gaming state transition processing) for shifting the gaming state.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section or the second starting ball entry section. When winning, from the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the combination of the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section, the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Also shifts the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section or the second start entry section, the first start entry is entered. Attention will be paid to the combination of the ball portion and the second starting ball portion and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The second starting ball entry portion is
An inaccessible state (low frequency support mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is equipped with a ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The game state transition means is
After switching to the second gaming state by the game state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit (opening / closing execution) that temporarily switches the second start ball entry unit from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. Equipped with transition processing at the end of mode and variable end processing)
The most advantageous gaming state transition unit is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting ball entry section after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching section. When the result of the internal lottery executed as is won, the gaming state is shifted to the most advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Machine.

Here, the inaccessible state of the second starting ball entry portion is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is completely inaccessible, but also a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of. In addition, the state in which the second starting ball can enter is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered temporarily. It may include a state of doing. In short, in the ball-entry state, the game ball flowing down the game area may be easier to enter into the second starting ball-in-ball section than in the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is a game ball to the second starting ball entry unit after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the ball is won, the gaming state is shifted to the most advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
A storage means for the second ball entry section (second) that stores a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section. 2 Equipped with a hold area Rb) for the result display
After switching to the second gaming state, the game state switching unit is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. The result of the internal lottery was notified, and the second gaming state was switched to the first gaming state.
The most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the internal lottery stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. A gaming machine characterized by shifting the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the internal lottery associated with the information is won.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the gaming state switching unit is a predetermined number smaller than the number of a plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching to the second gaming state. The second gaming state is switched to the first gaming state with the notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information of. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information is notified in the second gaming state, and then enters the first gaming state. If the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified, the winning is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
A storage means for the first ball entry section (first) for storing a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section. 1 Equipped with a hold area Ra) for the result display
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entry unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entry unit storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that notification is given priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry section in the storage means for the first ball entry section. Since the notification is given priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information, the second entry is made regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first entry section. The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the ball unit storage means can be preferentially notified. Therefore, since the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming machine pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 or the feature B4 of the present invention group.
The second gaming state is a gaming machine characterized by executing an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, since the second gaming state executes the internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state, the second gaming state is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information. The winning probability is high when the result of the internal lottery is notified, and the winning probability is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the first gaming state thereafter. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
When the game state switching unit wins the result of an internal lottery executed with the ball entering the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger, the second game state switching unit is the second game state. Switch to,
A gaming machine characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the gaming state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit is won, and the second game state switching unit is switched to the second game state. (2) The first from the second gaming state is triggered by notifying the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball entry section. Switch to the game state of. Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. It is a probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section or the second start entry section.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state. Further attention will be paid to the result of the internal lottery executed as an opportunity. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B6 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, since the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are arranged on the same path, the player launches the game ball on the same path. Allows the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B6 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a pachinko ball into the second starting ball entry section and makes it difficult to generate a gaming ball into the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the player can easily generate the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion by launching the game ball in the first path. By launching the game ball in the second path, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state includes a plurality of game states having different probabilities of winning the big hit lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game states.

However, since the transition of the gaming state is sorted by the lottery when the big hit lottery is won, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts a gaming state from a normal control state to a specific control state.
The normal control state is
The first game state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The second starting ball entry portion is
An inaccessible state (low frequency support mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is equipped with a ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The gaming machine is
A storage means for the second ball entry section (second) that stores a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section. 2 Equipped with a hold area Rb) for the result display
The game state transition means is
From the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry portion after switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state and switching to the second gaming state. A game state switching unit that switches from the second game state to the first game state (transition at the end of the open / close execution mode) triggered by notifying the result of the internal lottery associated with a small number of internal lottery information. Processing and variable termination processing) and
After switching to the second gaming state by the game state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit (opening / closing execution) that temporarily switches the second start ball entry unit from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state. Transition processing and variable end processing at the end of the mode) and
When the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information first stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit is won after switching to the second gaming state in the game state switching unit. Alternatively, after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit, the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit is performed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a most advantageous gaming state transition unit (gaming state transition processing) that shifts the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result is won.

Here, the inaccessible state of the second starting ball entry portion is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is completely inaccessible, but also a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of. In addition, the state in which the second starting ball can enter is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered temporarily. It may include a state of doing. In short, in the ball-entry state, the game ball flowing down the game area may be easier to enter into the second starting ball-in-ball section than in the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is an internal lottery first stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching to the second gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. If the result of the internal lottery associated with the information is won, or after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in the gaming state switching section, the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the above as an opportunity is won, the gaming state is shifted to the most advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game state switching unit is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit after switching to the second game state. The second gaming state is switched to the first gaming state when the result of the internal lottery is notified. According to this, the player expects a non-winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information from the second time onward is notified in the second gaming state, and the first one thereafter. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the game state of, or the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state. In some cases, you will expect to win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
A storage means for the first ball entry section (first) for storing a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information) associated with the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section. 1 Equipped with a hold area Ra) for the result display
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entry unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entry unit storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that notification is given priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry section in the storage means for the first ball entry section. Since the notification is given priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information, the second entry is made regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first entry section. The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the ball unit storage means can be preferentially notified. Therefore, since the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, the gaming machine pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group.
The second gaming state is a gaming machine characterized by executing an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, since the second gaming state executes an internal lottery with a higher winning probability than the first gaming state, a predetermined number of internals after the second gaming state are executed in the second gaming state. The winning probability is high when the result of the internal lottery associated with the lottery information is notified, and when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the first gaming state thereafter. The probability of winning is low. Further, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state, the winning probability becomes high. According to this, the player is most expected to win when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
When the game state switching unit wins the result of an internal lottery executed with the ball entering the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger, the second game state switching unit is the second game state. Switch to,
A gaming machine characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the gaming state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit is won, and the game state switching unit is switched to the second game state. (2) The first from the second gaming state is triggered by notifying the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball entry section. Switch to the game state of. Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. It is a probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section or the second start entry section.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state. Further attention will be paid to the result of the internal lottery executed as an opportunity. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group.
The ball-entry state is
A first ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric service opening time) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered.
A second ball-entry state (long-term electric service) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter temporarily and allows more game balls to enter than the first ball-possible state. With high frequency support mode of opening time),
After switching to the second gaming state at the gaming state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second starting ball entry unit from the ball entry impossible state to the first ball entry enabled state or the ball entry state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a second ball-entry state.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit switches to the second gaming state at the game state switching unit, and then the second starting ball entry unit is changed from the non-entry state to the first ball entry state. Switch to the possible state or the second ballable state. In addition, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting entry section is won. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous for the player than. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-entry state at the ball-entry state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 of the present invention group,
By setting the duration of the second ball-entry state to be longer than that of the first ball-possible state, it is possible to enter more game balls than the first ball-possible state. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the second ball enterable state has more game balls than the first ball enterable state by setting the duration longer than the first ball enterable state. Since the ball can be entered, the configuration of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state can be simplified.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 or the feature C6 of the present invention group.
The ball entry state switching unit moves the second start ball entry section from the ball entry impossible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit is the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. Is switched from the non-entry state to the first possible entry state or the second possible entry state, so that the player can enter the game ball into the first start entry section as an opportunity for the internal lottery. We will pay attention to the result of. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C7 of the present invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section is
The first winning result ("explicit small round high probability result" or "unspecified small round high probability result") and
It has a second winning result (“most advantageous result”) that is different from the first winning result.
When the first winning result is obtained, the ball-entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entry unit from the ball-impossible state to the first ball-possible state, and the second winning state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impassable state to the second possible entry state.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, when the first winning result is obtained, the ball entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball entry unit from the non-entering state to the first ball entry capable state. When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the second ball entry state, so that the player can switch the ball entry state as the second winning result. It is expected that the club will be able to switch to the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C5 or the feature C6 of the present invention group.
Expectations that the player expects that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. The expected effect execution means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect is provided.
The expected effect effect executed by the expected effect effect executing means when the ball entry state switching unit wins the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state based on the content.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit serves as an expected effect execution means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit is won. Since the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the first possible entry state or the second entry possible state based on the content of the expected effect executed, the player executes the expected effect. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected production performed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C9 of the present invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
The first expected production (first reach display) and
It has a second expected effect (second reach display) that is different from the first expected effect.
When the first expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second start ball entry unit from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state. It is characterized in that when the second expected effect is executed by the switching and the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impassable state to the second possible entry state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, when the first expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit makes the second starting ball entry part the first entry from the impossible entry state. When the player switches to the ball-capable state and executes the second expected effect by the expected effect executing means, the player switches the second start ball entry portion from the ball-impossible state to the second ball-possible state. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section is won, the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means at the entry state switching unit. You will expect to be able to switch to the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C10 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, since the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are arranged in the same path, the player launches the game ball in the same path. Allows the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature C12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C10 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a pachinko ball into the second starting ball entry section and makes it difficult to generate a gaming ball into the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature C12 of the present invention group, the player can easily generate the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion by launching the game ball in the first path. By launching the game ball in the second path, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state includes a plurality of game states having different probabilities of winning the big hit lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game states.

However, since the transition of the gaming state is sorted by the lottery when the big hit lottery is won, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. It is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed and the gaming ball entering the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a gaming state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts a gaming state from a normal control state to a specific control state.
The normal control state is
The first game state (low probability mode) and
A second gaming state (high probability mode) different from the first gaming state is provided.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 36) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entry section (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting ball entry section.
The second starting ball entry portion is
An inaccessible state (low frequency support mode) that makes it impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is equipped with a ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter.
The ball-entry state is
A first ball-entryable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric service opening time) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be temporarily entered.
A second ball-entry state (long-term electric service) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter temporarily and allows more game balls to enter than the first ball-possible state. With high frequency support mode of opening time),
The game state transition means is
A game state switching unit (transition process and variable end process at the end of the open / close execution mode) that switches between the first game state and the second game state.
After switching to the second gaming state at the game state switching unit, the second starting ball entry unit is changed from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state. Temporarily switching incoming ball state switching unit (transition processing and variable end processing at the end of open / close execution mode),
After switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in the gaming state switching section, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting ball entry section is It is provided with a most advantageous gaming state transition unit (gaming state transition processing) that shifts the gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Here, the inaccessible state of the second starting ball entry portion is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is completely inaccessible, but also a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of. In addition, the state in which the second starting ball can enter is not only a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered temporarily. It may include a state of doing. In short, in the ball-entry state, the game ball flowing down the game area may be easier to enter into the second starting ball-in-ball section than in the ball-incapable state.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is a game ball to the second starting ball entry unit after switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state switching unit. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the ball is won, the gaming state is shifted to the most advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, after switching to the second gaming state at the game state switching unit, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second starting ball entry unit from the impassable state to the first ball entry enabled state or the second ball entry state. Switch to the possible state. In addition, the most advantageous gaming state transition unit is the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting entry section is won. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous for the player than. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-entry state at the ball-entry state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
By setting the duration of the second ball-entry state to be longer than that of the first ball-possible state, it is possible to enter more game balls than the first ball-possible state. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the second ball enterable state has more game balls than the first ball enterable state by setting the duration longer than the first ball enterable state. Since the ball can be entered, the configuration of the first ball-entry state and the second ball-entry state can be simplified.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group.
The ball entry state switching unit moves the second start ball entry section from the ball entry impossible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-entry state or the second ball-entry state.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit is the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. Is switched from the non-entry state to the first possible entry state or the second possible entry state, so that the player can enter the game ball into the first start entry section as an opportunity for the internal lottery. We will pay attention to the result of. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section is
The first winning result ("explicit small round high probability result" or "unspecified small round high probability result") and
It has a second winning result (“most advantageous result”) that is different from the first winning result.
When the first winning result is obtained, the ball-entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entry unit from the ball-impossible state to the first ball-possible state, and the second winning state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impassable state to the second possible entry state.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, when the first winning result is obtained, the ball entry state switching unit switches the second starting ball entry unit from the non-entering state to the first ball entry capable state. When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the second ball entry state, so that the player can switch the ball entry state as the second winning result. It is expected that the club will be able to switch to the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group.
Expectations that the player expects that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. The expected effect execution means (voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect is provided.
The expected effect effect executed by the expected effect effect executing means when the ball entry state switching unit wins the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state or the second ball entry enable state based on the content.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit serves as an expected effect execution means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the ball entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit is won. Since the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the incapable state to the first possible entry state or the second entry possible state based on the content of the expected effect executed, the player executes the expected effect. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected production performed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D5 of the present invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
The first expected production (first reach display) and
It has a second expected effect (second reach display) that is different from the first expected effect.
When the first expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit changes the second start ball entry unit from the impossible ball entry state to the first ball entry enable state. It is characterized in that, when the second expected effect is executed by the switching and the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball entry portion is switched from the impossible ball entry state to the second ball entry enable state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, when the first expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the ball entry state switching unit makes the second starting ball entry part the first entry from the impossible entry state. When the player switches to the ball-capable state and executes the second expected effect by the expected effect executing means, the player switches the second start ball entry portion from the ball-impossible state to the second ball-possible state. When the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start entry section is won, the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means at the entry state switching unit. You will expect to be able to switch to the second ball-entry state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, since the first start ball entry part and the second start ball entry part are arranged in the same path, the player launches the game ball in the same path. Allows the game ball to enter the first starting ball entry section and the second starting ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention group.
A first route (left-handed route) in which it is easy to generate a game ball into the first start ball entry portion and it is difficult to generate a game ball into the second start ball entry section.
It is provided with a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a pachinko ball into the second starting ball entry section and makes it difficult to generate a gaming ball into the first starting ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the player can easily generate the ball entering the first starting ball entry portion by launching the game ball in the first path. By launching the game ball in the second path, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the intention of the player, and the player can comfortably play the game.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery. The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts from the normal control state to the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state includes a plurality of game states having different probabilities of winning the big hit lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game states.

However, since the transition of the gaming state is sorted by the lottery when the big hit lottery is won, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening / closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out port, 51 ... Design display Devices, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and a predetermined lottery can be executed based on the entry. A gaming machine comprising a starting ball-entry means and a gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery.
The normal control state is
The first game state and
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery, a second gaming state in which the player continues to stay at a predetermined continuation rate and makes it easier to win the predetermined lottery than the first gaming state.
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery, the player continues to stay at a continuation rate higher than the predetermined continuation rate, and has a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state .
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry means and
A second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means is provided.
The game state transition means is
A gaming state switching means for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state is provided.
The gaming state is the first starting ball entering means and the first starting ball entering means when the result of the predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means is won. Only when the combination of the second starting ball entering means and the first gaming state and the second gaming state becomes a predetermined combination, the transition to the third gaming state is performed.
The gaming machine is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies the number of rotations of a gaming time that stays in the second gaming state.

Images